Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and piping. 3 . Germany. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Add more detailed modelling elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as duct. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. fixtures. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. such as mechanical equipment. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical panels.

Create schedules. In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Metric: files for users working with metric units. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. annotations. When you open a training file. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. When you install the training files as instructed. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. to provide a richer and more finished design. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. templates. you learn where the training files are located. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. On the Contents tab. Create detail views. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. NOTE Depending on your installation. So. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. After completing each exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. however. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. and tags. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. as well as how to open and save them. and sheets to document the project. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. You do not design entire systems. However. For example. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. such as templates and families. Metric file names have an _m suffix. views. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. when you add ductwork. your Training folder may be in a different location. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you can choose to save your work.

If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. and click Open. a list of file types displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. and you can open any supported file type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 4 Click the training file name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. the Open dialog displays. For File name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you are prompted to save the changes.rvt) is selected. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. enter the new file name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the right pane. You may close the file with or without saving changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file. and click Save. For Files of type. and click the Training Files icon. 8 If you have made changes. double-click Imperial or Metric.rvt. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in.rvt and make changes. For example.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

scope. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. quantities. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. If the length of the elevation is changed. schedules. 2D and 3D view. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the parameter is one of association or connection. the operation of the software is parametric. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. You learn the terminology. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. drawings. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. hence. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and phases when you need it. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. sections. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. drawing sheets. ■ ■ 7 . The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and plans. If you move the partition. and schedules required for a building project. the hierarchy of elements. In the Revit MEP model.

and reference planes are datum elements. ducts. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sinks. When you change something. tags. boilers. For example. For example. levels. sprinklers. tags. and electrical panels. dimensions. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sinks. Examples include detail lines. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. boilers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. filled regions. For example. For example. They help to describe or document the design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls and ceilings are hosts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ducts. grids. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components. Datum elements help to define project context.

you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and ceilings. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. floors. and types.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Often. The project file contains all information for the building design. section views. To place levels. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. elevation views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. views of the project. In Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. such as roofs. schedules. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. By using a single project file. Most often. programming is not required. from geometry to construction data. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you can explicitly control them. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and drawings of the design. top of wall. If you can draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. However. families. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. In other cases. or bottom of foundation. first floor. for example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships. For example. and so forth). The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. North .This implementation provides flexibility for designers.

you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A type can be a specific size of a family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Then experiment with them. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. showing. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Type: Each family can have several types. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and wires. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. However. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families include ducts. With a few clicks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. hiding. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . identical use. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. System families can be transferred between projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can also display several project views at one time. and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. each in-place family contains only a single type. Unlike system and standard component families. A type can also be a style. For example. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). pipes.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. such as a 30” X 42” title block.

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To return the panel to the ribbon.

Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. architect-specific tools.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and for switching views. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and settings. then select what you want to modify. and CAD files. tools used for editing existing elements. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. project and system parameters.. data and systems. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.

Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays frequently used tools. closes the application menu (double-click). when adding duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. For example. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. To keep a panel expanded. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides access to common tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides requested information. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default.

(Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click. such as Export and Publish.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands... select a file to open.. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing.

annotation. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. saves a current project. (Licensing) close the file. family. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. click.. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. or template file.. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. and Walkthrough. but is not enabled by default. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. to.. provides views including Default 3D.

When you are using a command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. When you are highlighting an element or component. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. check the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Group. To hide the Status Bar.To undo or redo a series of operations. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Modify. To show the Status Bar again. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. workshared components. This displays the command history in a list. displaying the same information. In addition. when you switch to another editing mode. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. However. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Starting with the most recent command. repeat the command. or the Family Editor. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clipboard.

select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. Place a Wall. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type.

) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. click Training Files. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are several ways to access zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. click . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 9 To display SteeringWheels. In the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. on the Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 6 Click in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . When you release the mouse button.

As you move the mouse. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For more information about SteeringWheels. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 14 To exit the wheel. and then using the Zoom tool again. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. called drag controls. Similar controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. referred to as shape handles. After you are familiar with these tasks. and select the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.HVAC Plan .Design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. These are the drag controls. as shown. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display along the ends. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 Enter ZR. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and open Level 2 . Small blue dots.

In this example. or press CTRL+Z. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. Move. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. select the first item in the list.

In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Some commands. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. such as Move and Copy. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. as shown. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. For example. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Return. Press ESC twice. Click OK. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

link files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. click Browse. under Template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. create and manage views. Finally. In that case. under Create new. and geometry from the starting template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Project. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and loadable families. 5 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. You can either select a template from the template library. and click Open. click Training files. New projects inherit all the families. You can choose from several templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as coordination review and interference checking. such as ducts and pipes. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. system families. 2 In the New Project dialog. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. use copy/monitor. 6 Click OK. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 27 . settings. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and modify system settings.rte template.

16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. NH. Click OK. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select School or University. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. for City.rte template and click Open. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click Browse. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Click Cancel. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Edit. select Project template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 8 In the drawing area. If you want to use a template other than the default. and open North. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 10 Using the same method. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Click OK twice. ■ ■ Under Create new. click (Browse). review the construction materials listed. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. (Browse). under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For example. select Level 1. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can select it now. select Manchester. for Energy Data. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. For Location. When you select the material. navigate to Imperial Templates.7 In the Project Browser. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ For Building Construction. create another new project using the Construction template. In the Choose Template dialog. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

10 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 27 Click OK. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. under Duct Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. click Rectangular. plumbing. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Sizes. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. click Round. 22 In the right pane. and 12 1/2".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 5 1/2". 4 1/2". select Views. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. piping. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Pipe Settings.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. and demand factors for electrical systems. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice. and fire protection systems. Holding CTRL. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 26 In the right pane. power distribution systems. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane. For Categories. 24 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.rfa and click Open. wiring. and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Identity Data. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 23 In the left pane. 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Wiring. 33 Click OK. for 3 1/2". for 3/4". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 11 1/2". Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.

To enable this coordination. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. and groups that are contained in a project. For Sort by. Linking Projects In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Origin to Origin. under Template file. families. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. under Create new. Select Ascending Click OK twice. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. click Browse. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. In addition. select Associated Level. 38 Close the file. select Auto . 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Family and Type. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Notice that the file is saved as a template. For Then by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. From the Positioning list. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Training. For Then by. Click Open. select View Name. select Project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Sub-Discipline. sheets.rvt. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and change the name to My Library. Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click (Add Value). and select it as the library path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.11 In the Places dialog. click the My Library icon. and click Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click My Library. and click (Browse). and click OK twice. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. templates. 15 Under Library Name. Load. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. ➤ Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. or families. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 9 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. and decal image files. 22 Select My Library. 19 Click Cancel. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Edit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. such as bump maps. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 5 In the text editor. click Edit. 20 Click ➤ Options. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Places. 21 On the File Locations tab. custom color files. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. select Ignore words in uppercase. This path is determined during installation. click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 11 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. 3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 27 Click OK. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click the Spelling tab. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . specify the new location here. view the current path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.

6 In the Snaps dialog. click Restore Defaults. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap settings. click OK. click Training Files. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. As you zoom in and out within a view. 25 Close the file without saving it. click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 20 Under Settings.. click OK. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 18 Click ➤ Options.rte. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Edit. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . delete sheetmtl-CU. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .17 In the Spelling dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Browse. click the Spelling tab. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 19 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. In this exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Close. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 22 In the text editor. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and enter 1 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog. work with snapping turned off. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. enter SM. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. For example. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.7 Under Object Snaps. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click OK. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. deselect Chain. 10 On the Options Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. While sketching.

the command is only active for one click of the mouse. with or without saving it. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 25 Click OK. and delete the value 1’ .. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 22 Move the cursor downward. 26 Close the file. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. it will snap to the endpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. the midpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

methodology.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you first configure the linked architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of the tutorial. you can choose to save your work. If the tutorial training files are not present. go to http://www. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system. After finishing each exercise. and then you create a plenum level. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP).autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this lesson. This system consists of a cooling tower. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you first plan the system. 45 . In this exercise. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. However. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. After applying a color scheme to the zones. As you create the mechanical system. you design a mechanical system for an office building.

under Constraints. you add a level for plenums. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and click OK. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. roof. Next. These components are defined in the architectural training file. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file.rvt. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and after the linked model highlights. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. indicating that it’s the active view. ceilings. click to select it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. In this section. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. not in the MEP training file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.

and double-click West . For Offset. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. enter 8'.MEP. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and click OK. Click Plan View Types. 16 Press Esc. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down.6 In the Project Browser. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. The new level is placed. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and enter Level 2 Plenum. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Preparing Spaces | 47 . 9 On the Draw panel.

Under Identity Data. for View Range. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Cut plane. and click Properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For View Classification. enter an Offset of 1' 0". for Level. Under View Depth. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and then place spaces in various types of areas. for View Scale. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ Click OK twice. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for Default View Template. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0.Plenum. However. for Top. select Level Above (Level 3). verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. 20 In the Project Browser. select MEP . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In the next exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. NOTE After finishing each exercise. In this exercise.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Extents. In this exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you place spaces in areas of the building model. click Edit. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Apply Default View Template. and for Offset. For Sub-Discipline. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Design. you can choose to save your work. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select Plenum Plan.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Upper Limit. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings).Space Plan is highlighted. select Horizontal. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. For (Tag Location). For Offset. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0.rvt. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. walls. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select New. Placing Spaces | 49 . You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. click Training Files. select Level 2 Plenum. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. indicating that it’s the active view.

7 Click to place the space. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ensuring coordination between the files. 14 In the drawing area. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. 9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and then click Modify. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.

and then split the space using a space separation line. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 5 On the Options Bar. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.

as shown. 11 Close the schedule view. double-click the space name. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and press Enter. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and scroll to the newly placed space. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. change the space number to 216A. 10 Using the same method. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. enter Corridor. the plan view would have updated with the changes. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead.7 In the Project Browser. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the floor plan. which was numbered 219Q.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary.

12 Click in the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Number. enter Chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Offset. enter 4'. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Roof Level. enter 225PC. enter 0. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. right-click. select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 6 Enter VG. and click Element Properties. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 10 In the plan view. In the plan view. for Upper Limit. select Interior and Reference. For Limit Offset. click in the chase area to place the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.4 Press Esc. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and then click OK. Under Identity Data. expand Spaces. for Name. select Level 3. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.

Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 15 Press Esc. ceilings. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Bounding elements (such as walls. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. In the next exercises. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select Space Tag With Volume. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Type ZF. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. floors. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Loaded Tags. and click OK. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. All spaces in the view are tagged.Space Plan. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.

which removes the space from the Default zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click View ➤ Zones. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.rvt. After a space is placed in an area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. under Spaces.

4 In the drawing area. Using the Edit Zone tab. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click Finish Editing Zone. The Zone tool is active. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you assign spaces to a zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Instruction 221. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. To display space reference lines. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. select Occupiable. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and Electrical 220 spaces.rvt. and modify the zone properties. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and a new zone is created. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you assign spaces to zones in the building. under Energy Analysis. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this. under Spaces. The graphic in the System Browser updates. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. the Edit Zone tab displays. click Reference. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Computer Lab 222.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can add or remove a space from the zone.5 In the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser.

To view the zone in the drawing area. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).In the System Browser. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. type VG. select HVAC Zones. Instruction. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). you need to activate the zone visibility.

Area B. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 9 In the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. 11 Close the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Spaces. click Reference.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Training Files. for Name.rvt. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Finish Editing Zone. under Identity Data. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.West . enter 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You activated zone visibility in the views. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). expand 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .West . indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In this exercise.

15 Press Esc.Zoning view to activate it. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . zoom out. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Select Attached End. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. click in the Level 2 .

and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. for Name Value. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify the building. click Training Files. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Zoning view. double-click the zone tag. click the corner where the Top. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. space. double-click Level 1 . In this exercise. enter Lounge . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. Front.East. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. on the ViewCube.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. and zone information.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. verify that Wireframe is selected. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you isolate the space. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). and select 109 Lounge. Click (Highlight).

Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and then click OK. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .■ On the Details tab. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that <Building> is selected. click . scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. click . select 1_South_Lounge. For Construction Type. and in the People dialog. For People. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. the space information displays for the selected space. For Electrical Loads. select Lounge/Recreation. click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Next. Below the list of spaces and zones. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. select 109 Lounge. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.

and humidification set point. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that 70. floors. and dehumidification set point. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.00 °F : 90. click (Shading). outdoor air per area. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : 54.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. Next. verify that 74. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and other room-bounding components. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. roofs. and air changes per hour.00 °F : N/A is specified. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : N/A is specified. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. cooling air temperature. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. For Cooling Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. 12 Using the methods learned previously. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. heating air temperature. For Heating Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the cooling set point.

enter 212P. For Name. for Number. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Under Energy Analysis. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum. Click OK. open MEP . Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Offset. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. On the Place tab. and zone information. click Training Files. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. click Edit.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. In this exercise. For Location. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Manchester. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. double-click Level 2 . The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. For Postal Code. for City. click in the Value field. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and select space Plenum 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . enter 03101.rvt. under Energy Analysis. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. you verified building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . select School or University. for Energy Data.

verify that <Building> is specified. right-click. For Latent. and click Element Properties. select Library . for Building Service. a cooling load. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. or neither. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. click in the Value column. click Edit. select space Library 219. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK. enter 150 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area. For Space Type. ■ On the Weather tab. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that 1' 0" is specified. enter 200 Btu/h. for Values. select Specified. and enter 50 sq. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Project Phase. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Level 1 is selected. and click OK. For Export Complexity. For Ground Plane. you need to select this option. Select Area per person. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For People. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and click OK. ■ In the Type Properties dialog.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time.Audio Visual. both. ft. For Building Construction. For Sensible. If. under Volume Computations. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Specified. and then click . 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that New Construction is selected. For Condition Type. select Heated and cooled. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that Occupiable is selected. for Values. In order to select a space. Click OK twice.

select Actual. and under Heating Information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You have verified the building information. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . for Values. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that School or University is selected. For Electrical Loads. There should be no warnings displayed. For Building Service. Select the space associated with the warning. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Click OK twice. select Actual. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. click Edit. click Calculate. select 219 Library. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. is specified. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that Manchester. and click OK. verify that <Building> is specified. For Location. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Under Power. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). You should correct the space error in the building model. for Values. and can be modified here. Next.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 12 Click the Details tab. click Information). The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. NH. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Building Construction.

Space Plan. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. space.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 3 In the drawing area. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . space. 15 Review the loads report for project. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. In this exercise. For Color Scheme. 17 In the loads report.rvt. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. or zone information. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and zone information for the building model. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. click Training Files. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 16 After you review the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. select HVAC Zones. Click OK. select 219 Library. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and a loads report displays. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. indicating that it’s the active view. 21 Click OK. 19 In the drawing area. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. or make any changes to the model. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. under Energy Analysis. weather.

in 1-ton increments. under Schemes. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. select Tonnage Range. select the color scheme legend.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. select Spaces. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. For Phase. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. select Spaces.12 Close the file with or without saving it. select New Construction. For Name. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.rvt. Select Schedule building components. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. more category options are available. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Space Fill is the active view.

■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. click (Browse).■ Under Available fields. Select Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select HVAC. select Air Flow. select Not Between. enter Airflow Delta. and then click . In the Fields dialog. select Level. and Blank line. ■ Click Calculated Value. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and then select Hidden field. select Number.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Formula. For Type. For Then by. select Level. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Header. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. Click OK. enter . Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. for Formula. and then click Conditional Format. select Airflow Delta. For Fields.

all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. click the color swatch. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the Color dialog. and click OK. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. right-click to access schedule properties. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. verify that Show is highlighted. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. select red. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. For Background Color. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.■ ■ ■ For Value. In this exercise. In the next lesson. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays.

78 .

After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. you will create supply air systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

click Training Files. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to space 223. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

for Flow.Rectangular Face Round Neck . and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. as shown. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . the hosted elements are updated as well. 17 Move the cursor down. and then press Esc to end the command. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Also. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. click Place on Face. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and select Supply Diffuser . and then select both Copy and Multiple.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . select the diffuser. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. type 12. verify that Constrain is cleared. enter 425 CFM. 9 On the Placement panel. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. If the host element is modified or moved. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

click Yes. clear Leader. as shown. and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. As you place the return diffusers. click Place on Face. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open. 28 On the Placement tab. 22 In the drawing area.rfa. select one of the diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 24 In the Open dialog.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 25 In the drawing area. Next. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 29 Place 2 diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers. and click to select the lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser. as shown. under Other. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Level. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. for Reference. select Strong Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click OK.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Verify that the measured distance is 9'.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the Level 1 line. ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter 9' 0"2750. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK.

the space crossing lines display. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Press Esc. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. When you highlight a space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and click View ➤ Systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. After creating the logical connection. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files. including energy analysis. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. However. right-click the title. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.

Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. On the Options Bar. the number of elements is updated. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. System Name. 12 In the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. As you add diffusers to systems. 15 Click Cancel. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect Into. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and Flow value. review the Number of Elements. 11 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.

the air terminals are the children. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. under Mechanical. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Identity Data. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. Rename the system Next. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 18 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and the system connects them. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise.17 Using the method learned previously. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 25 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 22 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for Mark. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select the upper left diffuser. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.rvt. for Solution Type. In this case. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. the Network type provides several solutions. and display solution 1. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Network. indicating that it’s the active view. Also. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . which provides various layout tools. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the drawing area. A Generate Layout tab displays. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 5 On the Options Bar.

Round. click Modify. For Offset. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. Select Branch. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . enter 9' 10 1/2". For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type. For Flex Duct Type. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .7 On the Options Bar. as shown. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Duct Type. For Offset. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Settings. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 3'. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as is the elbow itself. For example. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution.

NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Values Displayed. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. select Duct Color Fill . This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Color Scheme. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. a disconnection exists. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.Flow. under Graphics. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight. Usually. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. The first time you press Tab. and click to select it. select By View. highlight a segment of the main duct. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. thus it is not part of the system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. but not all values are used in this view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. and then click OK. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. fittings.

26 Click OK. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Velocity. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and click OK. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 20 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and press Enter. under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Schemes. select the WSHP. and on the Options Bar.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select Duct Color Fill . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow.Airflow. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and then click to select it.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Click OK. Under Constraints. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated. and drag it to the right. and enter . select Friction. and select 16". highlight a segment of the duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. for Branch Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Restrict Height. Select Only.08 in-wg/100ft. select Calculated Size Only. click Cancel.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. Using this tool. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. pressure.

You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 35 Click Finish. also known as the critical path.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.HVAC Plan . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.3D MEP. click the corner where the Top. select the top right diffuser. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front. 14 In the Project Browser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. right-click the connector grip. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. NOTE When drawing duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Duct. 15 On the ViewCube. double-click MEP . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select 9' 10 1/2". and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area. The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. in space 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. Also. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.

and click to select it. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 30 Press Esc twice.

under Mechanical . such as a plenum. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. clear Restrict Height. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. select a segment of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and then click OK. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. Then. Automatically and manually lay out piping. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 . Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. as shown. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Horizontal .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Left Return . verify that Wall faces is selected.2-6 Tons . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . in corridor 328.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 7 On the Options Bar. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.High Efficiency . indicating that it’s the active view. and select WSHP .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted.

as shown. and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and enter 2'. click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and click to place the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. click the dimension.

and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click to place it in the mechanical room. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Under Mechanical. Click OK. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. for Water Flow. for Offset.14 Click Modify. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . select the 2 WSHPs. enter 12 GPM. enter 9'.

114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components.

indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. Creating a Piping System | 115 . analyses cannot be performed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 In the System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Unlike logical connections (systems). right-click the Systems column heading. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. but without a corresponding system.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Mech 330). 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. where it is easier to review the information. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create pipes to connect system components. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and click View ➤ Piping.

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. and the Edit System tool is not active. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Assigning a system component to an existing system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. while pressing Ctrl. for System Name. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select the 2 WSHPs. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 12 In the drawing area.In the System Browser. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you assign equipment to systems. Therefore.

) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.Design.13 Click Finish Editing System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.HVAC Plan . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. double-click Roof . for System Name. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.

24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. and click Expand All. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. and click OK. 23 Close the roof plan view. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 28 Using the same method. and bypasses the cooling tower. 29 Right-click CHWS. expand the Hydronic Return system category. In heating mode. indicating the logical connection. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). The hydronic supply system highlights in red.

34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. you can view several parameters. and click Column Settings. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. under Mechanical.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Water Flow. expand Piping. and click Properties. including the flow rate and size of the component. enter 18 GPM. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.

5 In the Filter dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design is highlighted. the boiler. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). click Check None. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and click to select it. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. press Tab to highlight the system. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .rvt. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and click OK. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Select a System dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. select CHWR. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. A system preview displays in red. When you draw a box to select components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select Mechanical Equipment. then the Select a System dialog displays.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can place the cursor over a system component. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Mech 330).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. duct. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. select Perimeter. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. 13 Click Cancel. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. verify that Solutions is selected. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. For Inset. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . click Settings. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. With each Tab. and press Tab 3 times. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area. and the flow for the other is 12. 17 Optionally. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the flow for one WSHP is 18. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc. and access its instance properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). under Mechanical.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.HVAC Plan . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Edit System. double-click Level 1 . the Number of Elements is now 8. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Next. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. which propagates flow throughout the system. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser. you physically close the CHWR loop.

Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 35 Using the drag control. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. under Mechanical. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. select a WSHP. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. access its instance properties. as shown. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and click Cancel. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Inset. and then click OK.40 In the Select a System dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 0''/12''. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK. Click Settings. enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . 48 While pressing Ctrl.

Either relocate the system components. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.50 Using the same method. Add piping to close the supply loop. To create the piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.

click Training Files. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Plan .rvt. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. indicating that it’s the active view.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. as shown. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.

Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The connections are automatically created. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 13 In the plan view. and click OK.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

and press Enter. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.In a plan view. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 2'. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 1' . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.7''. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

select the primary base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 19 In the plan view. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 18 Press Esc twice. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and select it. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and click OK.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. as shown. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. As you place piping runs that are close together.

and when the connector point displays. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. and click the minus symbol. 27 Move the cursor to the right. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. 28 Press Esc.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the bottom connector.

right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. 33 Press Esc. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter. enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. type 1'. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe.

37 Click Modify. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system. right-click. and click Element Properties. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.

select the cooling tower. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 48 In the plan view. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. 44 In the 3D view. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 40 Click Cancel. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 46 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. under Mechanical. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click OK. the value is 0 GPM. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). as shown. When you create the pumps in parallel. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. for Cooling Water Flow. The flow is being propagated through the piping.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler.50 In the 3D View. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and close the dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).

indicating that it’s the active view. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design is highlighted. as shown.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Valves | 143 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. The bypass valve is closed by default.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 20 Select the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. under Mechanical. and select Ball Valve . and click OK. and click Element Properties. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 19 Using the same method. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. In heating mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Initially.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. click Training Files.22 Using the method you just learned. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.HVAC Plan . The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Flow.Size. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 . for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill . click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and for Velocity. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and click to select the branch. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. enter 5 FPS. and enter 2. Under Constraints. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Select And. 13 Press Esc. Click OK. select Friction. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Branch Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment).

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Either relocate the system components. Using the System Inspector.Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. pressure.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. or manually modify the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System | 149 .rvt. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. select a different layout solution. click Training Files.

3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. flow. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. This information helps you modify the system design. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). as required.

and to size pipe. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.88 psi.67 psi. 10 Click Finish. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. targeting those systems that need attention. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. for Fluid Temperature. and click OK. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. the Static Pressure is 7. select 90° F.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. as shown. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 9 Using the same method. you need to validate them.89 psi. In this exercise. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.

you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. After you assign components to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 9 Right-click CHWS.Design. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you learned when placing components. and click View. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the Systems titlebar. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the System Browser.Design. and for pipe sizing. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).rvt. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. the pipe is associated with that system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 7 In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. double-click Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Warnings display. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and click Show to view all of the system components. After you have assigned all components to systems.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. For example. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. click Training Files. and double-click Level 3 .

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and confirm unassigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.Design floor plan. click Close. 13 Right-click CHWR. 12 In the System Browser. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and select Level 3 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. right-click Hydronic Return. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. otherwise.HVAC Plan . 14 Using the methods that you learned.TIP If you have multiple views open. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. 10 Using the same methods.

154 .

155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. distribution systems. ■ ■ For Material. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. expand Wiring . For Temperature Rating. select 75. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.04. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ For Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design.rvt. For Temperature. select 90. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ■ Click New Correction Factor. wiring. click (Open). select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.Wire Sizes. For Material. Select Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase. You also add a wiring type. enter THHN. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. As you place components and create circuits. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Wiring Types. select Copper.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. Click OK three times.■ ■ For Value. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . Then. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. power circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. Use the System Browser to check your design. First. Create a panel schedule.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.

In the Color dialog. select the color for Less Than 20.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Orange. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.Lighting Color Fill view is open. You can create additional color schemes. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . click Training Files. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select the color legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. for Basic Colors.00 fc. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.00 fc. for the Spaces Category.rvt. Under Scheme Definition. 2 In the drawing area.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.277. zoom to space Library 219. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.Lighting Ceiling plan. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The red field will clear once the +/. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.7 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Multiple. 23 Click OK. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. the fixtures will move accordingly. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Press ESC to end the command. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 25 On the Options Bar.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . click Check None. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar.277V.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. select Multiple Alignment.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. you modify the light fixture IES files. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .rvt. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.45 Press ESC to end the command.

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Color Fill plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.

enter . ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Type Mark. enter F15. Under Photometrics. enter . click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Identity Data. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.00 lm. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.93.00 VA. click the value for Initial Intensity. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. select T5 [HO].85.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Color Preset. select Luminous Flux. for Apparent Load. enter 162.277V and click OK. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Click OK twice. and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. select Xenon and click OK. specify 15000. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Click OK. for Lamp. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. In the Name dialog. Under Photometrics. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. select 463T5_S. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ Click Apply. Under Electrical.ies and click Open. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. Click OK. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.

Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture.Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. you add switches.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and receptacles to your design. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and Receptacles | 183 . Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Press Delete. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. Placing Switches. click (Open).

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 9 Press ESC to end the command.rfa and click Open. and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Select Junction Boxes .

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice.Offset. enter JB-1NL. enter 9’0”. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. note the Number of Poles is 1. zoom to space Library 219. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 21 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Mark. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.14 Press ESC to end the command. 15 Select the junction box. Under Electrical. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.

Distribution System. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Load. Space Name. 26 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Placing Switches. Space Number. 23 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 24 For any column. Select Size. Click OK. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. right-click and click Column Settings. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Expand General.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Voltage. and Number of Elements. Expand Electrical. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. 38 Select the receptacle.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open).rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to the space Electrical 220.equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.

6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar.Loads. enter PP-2B. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System.Surface: 100A. enter 20. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 120/208 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. #1 Pole Breakers. 14 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. Click OK. 7 Press ESC to end the command. select 480/277 Wye.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 20 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. For Panel Name. for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20. and for Category. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. click Check None. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. which is the logical connection between the elements. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

and for Category. enter 2. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. for Hot Conductors. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. click Check None.Loads. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 41 In the Filter dialog. select Wires.

Voltage. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and verify that Load. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Distribution System. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Rating.rvt. 13 In the System Browser. click Training Files. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Expand Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 22 With the junction box still selected. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.

Click Yes. Click OK. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 35 Press ESC to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click below the first one to place it. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 44 In the Edit Label dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. under Identity Data. enter FR4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 40 Click OK twice. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Tags. click Edit Type. 47 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . for Type Mark.

Deselect Break and for Suffix. 56 In the Filter dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . enter a comma. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Break. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. for File Name. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. For Circuit Number. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 52 In the Save As dialog. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and click Apply. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click Save. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and for Category. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.rvt. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. Click OK. for switch ID. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.

click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuits are used for power. 2 In the drawing area. select Electrical Fixtures. lighting. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Click OK. click Check None. and data systems. click Training Files. select the PP-2B panel.rvt. 7 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space.

click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Select the wire again.rfa. and click Open. select Wiring. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . Click OK. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and in the drawing area. and in the right pane. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. enter 2. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for Hot Conductors.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.Loads. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.

Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 29 In space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. as shown. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Next you balance the loads for your design. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.rvt. 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. select panel LP-2B. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 2 In the drawing area. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Finally. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

14 Close the warning dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#12. for Rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10.3616 VA).4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Scroll down. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Click OK.3712 VA. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. enter 30A. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Under Electrical-Loads. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and Phase C . B. click Rebalance Loads. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.

A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. under Electrical . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK.rvt. for Rating. 17 Close the warning dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. enter 25A. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.15 Select panel PP-2B. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 30A. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click (Open). Select PP-2B. for Rating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK.Loads. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK.

for Appearance. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Panel Schedules. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Font Size. 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. expand Sheets (all). Under Header Text. enter 3/32. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 7 Select the schedule. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font Size. click Training Files. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Font. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Body Text. under Other. click (Open). 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and open E601 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. select Bold and Italic. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. enter 1/8. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report.

Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. select space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Warnings. select MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. in addition to loading existing families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create a PVC pipe type. planning is critical to a successful design.Vent. type PVC . and click Properties. right-click PVC . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 219 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size.Sanitary. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Duplicate.Design is open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.

enter 10°. and click Main. 10 On the Selection panel.Vent is listed.PVC . 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC .rfa.DWV: Standard. enter 5/8''. Tee. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Sanitary. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.DWV. 22 Click New Size.PVC .Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Sanitary. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 For Outside.Sch 40 . 18 For System Type. 21 In the right pane. enter 27/32''. under Pipe Types.0''. under Mechanical. Tap. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 6 Click OK. PVC . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.Sch 40 . select Tee. select Branch. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 For System Type. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter -4' . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 26 Click OK. click Modify. select Plastic. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Cross. select Tee Vent . and click OK. 27 For the new pipe size. select None. for Nominal. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter 1/2''. click Pipe Settings. for Material. 17 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.DWV: Standard. For Offset. 13 In the right panel. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.

and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the sanitary plumbing system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and hot and cold water piping. vent.

and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. including the men’s room (space Male 107). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design is open. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 1 urinal. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and verify that Level 1 .

Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.Flush Valve . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown. under Water Closet . 1 wall-mounted urinal. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Wall Mounted.1. and 3 sinks. against the left wall. select Public . 5 On the Placement panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 4 On the Element panel. in the Type Selector.

7 Click to place another toilet. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. above the first in the standard toilet space. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again. zoom in closer. use the reference line to center the fixture.

2'' Drain.Rectangular. select 5''x5'' Strainer . under Floor Drain . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 14 Click Modify. In placing the fixture. 12 On the Placement panel. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.

17 If all disciplines are displayed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. a urinal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. right-click in the System Browser table heading. In this exercise. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). click Training Files. and review the components listed under this system. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and a floor drain. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and click View ➤ Piping.rvt.

starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and verify that Level 1 . 8 In the Filter dialog. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design is open. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 In the plan view. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 In the Project Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>). draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. for System Name. You include the bathroom space number in the name. If you deselected the drain. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. expand Sanitary. so the Create Sanitary System is available. click Finish Editing System. enter Sanitary 107. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel.

The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. and click OK. select Sanitary 107. as shown. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example. a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.

select 4''. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Solution Type. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter -1' 0''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 In the left pane. and modify it to meet project requirements. 25 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and click Settings. enter -4'-0”. select Main. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The default settings are automatically modified. select Branch. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter -1' 0''. 21 On Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Intersections. click Solutions. and for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. 23 For Offset. for Diameter. 27 Click Modify. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. for Slope. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.19 On the Options Bar. for Offset.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

30 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

Rectangular. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Lavatory . as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. in the Type Selector.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. select 22''x22'' . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design is open. click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Public. 4 On the Element panel.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select Multiple. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions.7 Click Modify. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. enter 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

15 Click the 3 sinks. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 16 On the Edit System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. click Finish Editing System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

under Design ➤ Plumbing . 19 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Draw Pipe.In the System Browser. with the tee fitting selected. as shown. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 22 In the plan view. 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).

When you press the Spacebar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. press Spacebar. enter 2' .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. for Offset. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify.6''.

click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and when the vertical center line displays.PVC . under Wye 45 Deg Double . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 29 In the Type Selector. 30 In the 3D view. select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting.DWV.

and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. 36 In the section view. enter 1'. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. In the next steps. enter 6''. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown.

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. 48 Click Modify. press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method.DWV.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.PVC . select Standard. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. under Trap P . 52 In the plan view. 56 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

Click Modify. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. enter 6''. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left.. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click in the plan view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. Press Esc. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. as shown. and select a proposed solution.

65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. for Slope. and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack.

7 On the Selection panel.DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select Standard. 10 In the 3D view.Plumbing Plan . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .PVC . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. right-click the top connector. and click the intersection to place the fitting. select the vertical stack. click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. 9 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Design. 3 In the Section view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click to draw the pipe. as shown. select the elbow fitting on the right.Floor level line. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Sch 40 .

DWV.11 Click Modify. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Standard. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. for Offset. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once. 12 Select the fitting. enter 1'-0”. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 .PVC . as shown. 15 Press Esc. under Plug . 17 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar.

click Training Files. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.rvt.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 7 In the left pane. select Main. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click OK.) 10 Click OK. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. For Offset. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. enter 9' 3''. select Pipe Types: Water. double-click 3D Plumbing . 17 In the Filter dialog. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the left pane. select Plumbing Fixtures. 14 In the System Browser. and for System Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Domestic Cold Water. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. For Offset. minimize the Sanitary system. if necessary.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click Main. and sinks. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. expand Unassigned. for System Type. 15 In the plan view.Overall. 4 In the right pane. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 9 In the left pane. click Check None. for System Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. select Pipe Types: Water. urinal.

verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. For Flow Conversion Method. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Edit System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 19 On the System Tools panel. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

at the intersection of the water main pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 30 In the plan view. and click to place the pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 On the Options Bar. as shown. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. enter 0”/12”. and press Enter. 32 Move the cursor to the right. connect the second toilet. select Water. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 4'0”. enter 7''. click to the left of the urinal. For Offset. 33 Click Modify. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. for Offset. under Pipe Types. as shown. enter 3' . For Slope. select 3/4''.2 7/8''. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top DCW connector.25 Using the same method. select the sink above the urinal. enter 10'. 34 In the plan view. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. and click the connector. for Offset.

41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click OK. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line. 40 Click Modify.

you create the hot water system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.Overall.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan .rvt. and verify that Level 1 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. while pressing Ctrl. 5 In the System Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. click Training Files. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 2 In the Project Browser. expand the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design is open.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 Click Modify.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. and click OK. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.Tankless. 12 In the Type Selector.6 Gallon. When designing systems. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click Edit System. under Water Heater . enter Domestic Hot Water 107. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 15 In the System Browser. Default Domestic Cold Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. verify that DCW 107 is selected. for System Name. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 13 In the plan view. Default Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. as shown. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 0. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. In later steps. in the Unassigned folder. you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser.

and select Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor to the right. and on the Edit System panel. select the water heater. Offset: 4' 6''. for Offset. right-click the middle left connector. 24 Move the cursor up. and click the water main line. click Finish Editing System. as shown. 27 Click Modify. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 10’. and press Enter. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. enter 1' 6''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 25 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 23 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 19 Select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

and for Offset. enter 1''. enter 9' 0''. enter 1' 6''. click Edit System. select a sink. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. for Offset. 33 On the Edit System panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 37 On the Options Bar. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and press Enter. and on the Placement Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and in the System Selector. click Finish Editing System. 35 On the Options Bar. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and click Draw Pipe. select 4'-6''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). for Diameter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 30 On the System Tools panel. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 38 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 36 Move the cursor down.

and press Enter.39 Move the cursor down. for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. and click just above the bottom sink. 40 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. 42 Click Modify.

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

However. click Training Files. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. 267 .autodesk. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 2 Right-click Standard. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this tutorial. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You create a new pipe type. After finishing each exercise. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you can choose to save your work. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this lesson. and click Duplicate.

You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In the left pane. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. or architectural components. for Material. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Offset. 9 Click OK.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In the next exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. 6 In the Project Browser. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you modify the type properties of the pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Main. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. click Rename. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Carbon Steel. For Pipe Type. and click Properties. For System Type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. structural beams. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. duct. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Next. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. However. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. under Mechanical.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Group parameter under. 8 Using a crossing window. and click Element Properties. click Training Files. select space Instruction 221 as shown. enter Zone 1. When you highlight a space using the cursor. under Fire Protection. select Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Add. 6 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Name. and then click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select the upper half of the building. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. right-click. Under Categories. the space crossing lines display. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Fire Protection.rvt. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Click OK twice.

under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 10 In the Filter dialog. select Zone 1.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that only Spaces are selected. enter Zone 2.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Training Files. including a calculated value parameter. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 13 Using the same method. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. and then access instance properties. and click OK. to which you add various parameters. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Fire Protection Plan . click the Formatting tab. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the Formatting tab. For Group parameter under. click Add Parameter. For Name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. double-click on each column separator. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Maximum Spacing. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 7 Click OK. Click OK. For Type of Parameter. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Length. for Name. and on the ribbon. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the Maximum Spacing column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. The schedule displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select To the nearest 1'. 14 Select the new header. and click Field Format. 10 In the Format dialog. Select Schedule keys. For Rounding. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Maximum Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter 15. select Spaces. 6 Using the same method. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter Light. For Units. select Feet and fractional inches. For Key name. Obstructed-Combustible.

Unobstructed Extra. select Spaces. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. under Available fields. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter 130. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter.

under Other. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. For Formula. Click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Fixed. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Units. select 0 decimal place. for Sorting/Grouping. select Area. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Then by. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Rounding.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Type. and click Field Format. click Edit. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click View Properties. For Discipline. and click OK. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Number. for Sort by. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. click . select Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. In the Fields dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 20 On the Formatting tab. Select Header and Blank line. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Enter the formula operator / after Area.

At the bottom of the dialog. For Fields. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. select Hidden field. and then select Hidden field. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Field Format. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. select Sprinkler Zone. 27 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 30 Click OK twice. Under Field formatting. right-click the schedule. for Filter by. for Filter. and select Totals only. For Then by (second instance). select Number. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 26 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. verify that Use default settings is selected.

and Count. delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Available fields. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Grand totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. System Name. for Embedded Schedule. double-click Type. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. For Category. select Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Calculate totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. under Other. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. On the Formatting tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Fields. and select Totals only. select Count.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

50 Access the instance properties. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click OK. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 46 With the space still selected. 44 In the schedule. under Identity Data.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select space 221 Instruction. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. As a result. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Ordinary. and access the instance properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you are actually editing information in a database of building information. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. select Light. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. but their values are not determined. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 41 In the plan view. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. By following the recommended workflow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 279 . and double-click Level 2 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the system.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.autodesk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. At the end of this tutorial. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.rvt.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. After placing the initial sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 3 In the Project Browser. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When this happens.

while pressing Ctrl.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Pendent . as shown. 10 Press Esc twice. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 11 In the drawing area. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. and select Sprinkler . select the sprinklers that you placed. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.

15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then press Esc. Also. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

18 Type WT. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 25 Click OK. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 19 In the floor plan. 200B. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and 200C). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and click Element Properties. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 10' 6". This number is determined in the schedule. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. specify a vertical offset. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Offset. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Sprinklers | 283 .Fire Protection Plan .FP_Ceiling view. 17 In the Project Browser. For Number. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 11. move the cursor to the right. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 29 Press Esc. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. enter 14' 6". you adjust the offset. open Design ➤ FP . click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and press Enter. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Next.Design.

you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.30 Close the file with or without saving it.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. After creating the logical connection. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and with piping (physical connection). In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. However. In the next exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 1 In the Project Browser.

and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. named Fire Protection Wet. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. within the Piping Systems folder. click View ➤ Systems. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. Creating a Piping System | 285 . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

indicating the logical connection. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. system equipment. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. enter FP Wet_Zone2. and click Select. place the cursor over a sprinkler. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and a piping layout preview displays. 12 On the Options Bar. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. for System Name. and number of elements in the system. For Pipe Type. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 15 In the drawing area. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and select the system. 13 In the System Browser. In the left pane. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select an initial piping layout. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. press Tab. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.Wet is selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. For Offset. select Branch. 19 Click OK. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 11 With the system still selected. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. providing system editing tools. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.

The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 22 On the Options Bar. When the layout is finished.20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". In general. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 5. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. as shown. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines). 23 For Offset. select 2". 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. for Diameter. click Place Base. click Solutions.

and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. On the Generate Layout panel. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. A (parallel movement control) displays. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.

Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe. and various manual pipe creation tools. Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then you create piping to physically connect them.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 3 If necessary. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Plan . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Design is highlighted. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Add To System. mechanical equipment. and select solution 5. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. radiators. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. 12 On the Options Bar. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. for Solution Type. and pipe or duct is created. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . air terminals. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). click Finish Editing System. 8 In the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. verify that Network is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. 9 On the Edit System panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. or a system component to display system tools.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 28 In the drawing area. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 25 Select the sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. right-click. and then tile the views. select 9'. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. for Offset. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 31 In the plan view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. for Scale. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design is highlighted. ■ 6 Press Esc. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter.

25 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. The pipe diameter is modified. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. 26 Using the same method.

You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet fire protection system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. In this exercise. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and view references. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. 2 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. If the view included detail graphics. 307 . You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and apply a view template. click Training Files. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. matchlines. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. as shown. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 9 Click OK. more focused. and then press Esc. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and click Rename. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 4 Using the same method. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the drawing area. create dependent views for areas B and C.rvt.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 21 Using the same method. Click OK. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area. select 11. select Double Dash 5/8". 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and then press Esc. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. on the Options Bar. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 20 Select the upper view reference and. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select black.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Pattern. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value. In the Color dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight. 13 Press Esc twice./ ---).

27 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. as shown. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. The section crop lines no longer display. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Apply Default View Template. select Documentation. 2 Zoom in. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Click OK.Domestic Water.rvt. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Properties. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. for View Name. click Training Files. and click to select it. For Default View Template. for View Classification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 4 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics. enter Plumbing Isometric . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. and select the section box. For Sub-Discipline. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing Isometric. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select 3. For Pattern. select Dash. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. Click Apply. 12 Using the same method. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and then click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown).13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it.

click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. In the drawing area.Domestic Water view with detailing.15 Press Esc. click Reveal Hidden Elements. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Right-click.Sanitary Waste. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. press Tab 3 times. On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click to select it.

For Slope. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you use a plan view to create a callout view. verify that Common is selected. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. select To the nearest 1/8". click on the Format value. 25 Press Esc twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and click to place the spot slope annotation. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and then place the callout view on a sheet. In the Format dialog. as shown.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 21 Click OK twice. for Rounding.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. for Scale.

under Sheets (all). Creating Callout Views | 317 . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. double-click M601 . Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. using the same method. Click OK. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 5. for Line Weight.

For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. for View Name. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. right-click the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Click OK. and select the viewport.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click Apply View Template. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Rename. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 25 In the Project Browser.

you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. ■ work with model-based components. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. duct tags. and annotation to create a legend.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. as shown. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 8 With the text still selected. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a return diffuser. as shown. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice. Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct. a segment of round duct. 15 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. click Load. 17 Click Modify. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. clear Leader.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary. under Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. for Ducts. 21 In the Load Family dialog.

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. as shown. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Leader. 31 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. Creating Annotations | 325 .25 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click OK. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and lock lighting fixtures. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.36 Press Esc twice. lay out. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. That’s because you changed a type property. for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 40 Using the method learned previously. select Dot Open 1/16". select the last tag placed. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. not simply an instance property. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.

and then select the interior face of the wall. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 12 Press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. select the dimension line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.

Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Using the same methods. and press Enter. Because the dimensions are locked.3 1/2"). and offset them 8' from the wall. annotation symbols. enter 8'. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and notes. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Creating a Legend | 329 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.13 Using the same method. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 18 Select the dimension value (7' .

place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select 1/4" = 1' -0". select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Diffuser Legend.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area.rvt. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. click below the title to place the diffuser. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .8 Neck. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 331 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 21 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.RISE symbol for the copy start point. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.

in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

39 With the viewport still selected. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. detail groups. A detail callout that references another view. and text. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. click Training Files. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting view using detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 335 . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.113 East elevation view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. clear Leader. place Power Riser .113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 8 Using the same method. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Next. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. giving the appearance of a single view. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. select the 113 North view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Activate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. right-click. under Identity Data.

You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. as shown. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 21 Using the drag control. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click Activate View. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Press Esc.

In the Line Styles dialog. click New. click Training Files. verify that Chain is selected. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. expand Lines. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.113 North view. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. enter Electrical Power. select 6. and click OK. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. notice that there are no snaps active. In the New Subcategory dialog. and then click OK. for Line Weight. 8 On the Options Bar. 2 Close the Project Browser.rvt. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. Under Modify Subcategories. as shown. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . As you draw. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).

10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 11 Using the same method. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . as shown.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

42 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .36 Press Esc. enter 3/32". and press Enter. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. for Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length.5. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 46 In the Project Browser.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and press Enter. expand Groups ➤ Detail. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and click OK. enter Ground. Using the same method. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. you can ensure that they stay together. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. click on the length dimension value. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Press Esc. enter 0 0.25. 50 With the group selected.125. for Name. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.

Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. 52 Select the detail group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.51 Using the method learned previously. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.

and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 2 Right-click the copy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Rename. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In later exercises. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and will place it on sheet E01. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Name. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.

and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. Back. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge. 7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc.

Click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Under Names. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. select 3D Views. right-click. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Walkthroughs. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Apply View Template.

Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 19 Complete the text labels. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Typical. (Right). as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .

24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 23 Click on the crop region. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 25 Click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. as shown. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.To rotate and reposition a text label. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

select the isometric view.29 In the drawing area. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . For Scale. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. and click Properties. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. right-click the view name.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select 3" = 1'-0". By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 In the drawing area. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 12 On the Element panel. select Plumbing. select Documentation. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For View Classification. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 9 Zoom in to the component. as the rectangle start point. for Sub-Discipline. as shown. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 22 Click Modify. select the filled region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. (Line). Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 21 In the drawing area.P. 20 Select 1. 23 In the drawing area. for Type.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. select C. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Concrete.I. and click OK. 18 With the filled region still selected. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

select Multiple. and then click to select them. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 34 Press Esc. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

41 Type ZF to zoom out. (Rectangle). and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region.

and then click to select them. as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.D. for Name. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 52 In the Create Group dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and click OK. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.. 49 Click Modify. select the Flashing Membrane group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F.

add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown.55 Press Esc. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 71 Click Modify. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Leader and Free End. 72 If necessary. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and then click OK.

78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the text insertion point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. 81 Select the text note. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. select the view title. and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area. 90 Press Esc.

and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select 3. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Click OK.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.rvt. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Import units. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Click Open. For Layers. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Visible. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For A-----NPP. click Training Files. for Line Weight.dwg. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Auto-Detect. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Colors. you import a CAD detail drawing. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.

Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful